THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY Developing a Computer Therapy Program in POWER POINT (1997-2003 PPT) Presented in Power Point with Dr.
Download ReportTranscript THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY Developing a Computer Therapy Program in POWER POINT (1997-2003 PPT) Presented in Power Point with Dr.
Slide 1
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 2
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 3
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 4
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 5
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 6
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 7
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 8
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 9
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 10
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 11
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 12
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 13
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 14
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 15
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 16
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 17
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 18
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 19
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 20
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 21
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 22
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 23
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 24
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 25
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 26
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 27
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 28
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 29
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 30
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 31
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 32
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 33
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 34
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 35
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 36
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 37
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 38
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 39
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 40
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 41
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 42
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 43
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 44
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 45
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 46
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 47
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 48
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 49
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 50
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 51
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 52
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 53
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 54
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 55
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 56
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 57
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 58
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 59
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 2
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 3
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 4
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 5
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 6
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 7
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 8
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 9
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 10
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 11
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 12
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 13
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 14
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 15
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 16
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 17
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 18
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 19
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 20
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 21
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 22
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 23
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 24
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 25
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 26
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 27
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 28
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 29
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 30
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 31
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 32
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 33
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 34
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 35
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 36
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 37
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 38
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 39
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 40
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 41
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 42
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 43
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 44
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 45
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 46
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 47
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 48
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 49
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 50
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 51
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 52
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 53
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 54
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 55
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 56
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 57
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 58
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.
Slide 59
THE POINT OF POWER THERAPY
Developing a Computer Therapy Program
in POWER POINT
(1997-2003 PPT)
Presented in
Power Point
with
Dr. Hall
(Click anywhere to go on…)
Viewer discretion advised
We are going to use this POWER POINT presentation to teach you how
do develop a computer program, using Power Point, for therapy in
Communication Disorders.
•
I understand the Point part but what does the
Powder do?
ER
It’s not POW DER
Celia! Its POWER and it means you can
create, almost like MAGIC, a powerful computer lesson with a
minimum of effort and time.
Please click on the RED arrow to proceed
Your assignment for this Module is to develop, using the
“MAGIC” of POWER POINT, a simple 3 Slide Therapy lesson
(you can do more if you wish) which teaches something, is
interactive and has feedback. Hopefully it will also be
interesting to the student, and easy and even fun to develop,
so please, don’t have a bad feeling about this, at least yet.
Click the cursor on the red arrow to see an example…
Drawing Inferences #1
This couple is about to begin…
• Dancing
• Fighting
• Eating
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to go
back and try again.
Sorry, you MISSED that one!
Please Click the arrow to
go back and try again.
You scored a hit! Good Job!
• I used animated GIF’s for my pictures which I drew myself, but any still
picture (GIF or JPEG) etc. would do. Power Point comes with a small library
of pictures and sounds which can be Inserted into a lesson; or you can
insert or copy and paste from other programs (some of the sounds, for
example, that I used came originally from Hyperstudio); and then again,
there is a virtual endless sea of pictures and sounds you can copy off the
Web, or if you have access to Boardmaker, you have it made.
• You can, of course, also insert simple movie clips instead of a GIF picture
into your lesson. You can get these off the Web too, or if you have nothing
else to do and have a video camera, you can cheaply make them yourself.
Here is a video of me, for example, in my younger days (55ish give or take
5) giving a CD student a lesson in Self-Defense…To see this video, click on
the Camera below, but be warned that some of the scenes may be graphic
and should not be seen by anyone under 60 without adult supervision; and
please remember…
• Don’t try this in the home !!!
(Click on the picture to repeat, or the
red button if you have seen enough!)
•
•
Oh well, that is why I am a Speech Pathologist and not a Karate Instructor!
Actually we used this quicktime movie in a lesson to demonstrate the
familial phrase, “He asked for it.”
So how do we start? The first thing we must have is a Power Point
Program as found in Microsoft Office. There are a 2004, a 2008, and now a
2010 Version of Power Point.
• This is the 2004 Version as shown in the “About Power Point”
information provided In the Power Point Pull Down Menu at the
extreme upper left hand corner of the screen.
• When you open up Power Point, please notice the large slide in the center.
This is where we will develop our lesson. To the left is a space for a
column of small slides (right now there is only one) that will show the order
of the slides as they are made. We can use this column to maneuver
between the slides as they increase in number, by clicking on the slide we
want..
•
If we put the cursor after the first slide (on the left) and press the “Return”
key, we will get a new slide, and if we do it again, we will have the third
slide we need for this project.
•
•
•
To get back to the first slide, we can click on the first slide in the left hand
column. Now we can start to develop our lesson. But what will that lesson
be? It could be about Confrontation Naming (i.e., naming the pictures), or
Categorization, or Spelling or Grammar such as prepositional phrases, or
anything. For this example, lets use Categorization as the central goal of
the therapy lesson. For example, we could ask the question, “Which one
doesn’t belong?”
Looking at the Center Slide, we can see that there are two Text Boxes
outlined on the slide. One says “Click to add Title” and the other says “Click
to add text.” We may wish to move, remove and/or modify them so we have
room for our pictures. We can move a text box by moving the cursor
towards the edge until it turns into a small hand. Then with the hand
showing we hold down the button on the mouse and drag the box to the
new location. Or if we click the mouse so that the box has little circles in
the corners and then hit the delete key, the text box will be wiped out.
To make the box thinner we put the cursor on one of the small circles on the
edge or corners of the box until it turns into an two way arrow box. Then
with the mouse button down we drag the edge to the desired size.
•
To add a picture, we go to the “Insert” Pull Down menu and scroll down to the “Picture”
option. A new menu pops up to the left with more choices. We could click on the
“From File” option if we had pictures we had drawn or copied off the Web and saved
somewhere on our computer; or we can use the “Clip Art” option if we want to use the
Power Point’s library.
•
When we select
“Clip Art” we
will get a Clip
Art Gallery
which is a
search engine
for the pictures
provided as part
of the Power
Point Program.
The Pictures will
be organized by
Category, but
you can also
type in a search
word. When
you find the
picture you want
you can use the
Insert link to put
it on your slide.
• Using the same techniques, we can get three pictures for our
lesson slide from the library or other sources. Your library may not
have the same pictures as mine. But the principle remains the
same. They could be, for example, a cat, a boat and a car.
Hence, the question posed on slide #1 might be, “Which picture
does not belong?”
•
The next thing we might wish to
do is set up page (slide) 2 as a
negative response page, and
page 3 as a positive response
page.
•
For the negative response page
we might wish to have some kind
of picture and a written response,
like, “Sorry, wrong picture. Please
try again.”
•
We can use the Power Point Clip
Art Library, as before, and type in
the word “Sad.” Clicking on the
picture will insert it into our slide
• The third slide could be the Positive Reinforcement slide. Among
other things, we can insert a happy type of picture on this card using
as we did before the Power Point Library.
• Now that we have our three slides, our lesson strategy and our
pictures, we need to introduce some interactivity to the lesson.
• We can start with the first Slide again in which the student must
make a choice among three pictures, one of which does NOT
belong. Hence, there are two Wrong Pictures and one Right
Picture. Lets start with the wrong option. We need to create a
button which will take the student to the Negative Reinforcement
Page if the wrong picture is selected.
• One way to make an interactive button is to click on the Picture or
the Text Box that we would like to make interactive. When we do
that, we will see the little circles appear in the edges of the picture or
text box. Then we go to the pull down menu at the top of the
screen that says “Slide Show” and move the cursor down the list
until we highlight “Action Settings.” You can see all this on our
next slide.
• When we click on the “Action Settings” option, an Action Settings
Pop up window will appear (as shown in our next slide)
• .
•
Here there are a number of options. We can select an action to occur on a Mouse
Click (or when the mouse moves over the area).
When we click on the
“Hyper Link to” radial
button,” a pull down
menu appears giving
us a choice of which
card the lesson should
move to next.
There is also a Play
Sound pull down
menu which will give
us some choices of
sounds.
When we click “OK”
we are finished.
•
•
•
Hence, for the “Sailboat” picture, if the student clicks on that picture, the
lesson will go to the next slide, which happens to be the Negative
Reinforcement Slide.
We can repeat this procedure with the “Airplane” picture so that if the student
clicks on that picture, the lesson will also move to the Negative Reinforcement
Slide.
Once the student has arrived on the Negative Reinforcement Slide, it will be
necessary to have a button available so the student can return to the
Question Slide to try again.
This time, rather than making a
Picture or a Textbox interactive,
we will insert a separate button
for this purpose. We can do
this by going to the “Slide
Show” pull down menu, as
before, but this time selecting
the “Action Buttons” option.
When we do this another popup
menu will appear with a list of
button types to chose from.
We shall select the “last Slide
Viewed”
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
•
•
When we click on our choice for a button, nothing seems to happen, except the
cursor will appear in the form of a cross (+). We place the cross where we want
the button to be on our slide, and holding down button on the mouse drag the
cursor. A square will appear which we will make the size of the button we are
creating.
When we release the button on the mouse, the same “Action Settings” menu we
saw before will appear. It will show the action of the link (I.e, “Last Slide Viewed,”
and give us an opportunity to add sound.
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
At this point I am
pleased to say that
we have made a
Clean Sweep of
things. We have
looked at enough of
the Power Point tools
to complete the three
slide project for this
Module. We have
developed a lesson
that teaches
something, is
interactive, and
provides feedback.
Lets see how it
works…
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to
return
• YES, YES, YES, YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
• That was CORRECT.
• There are many more capabilities in Power Point, but we need only
discuss a few more odds and ends to satisfactorily complete our class
Project. For example, you remember on Slide #1 of this lesson, how we
can click anywhere on the slide to move on to the next slide? This
strategy does not work well, however, when we want to use buttons to
move the lesson. Hence, we must disable the “click anywhere” option.
This can be done under the Slide Show pull down menu through the
Slide Transition option.
• When we click on the Slide on
the screen. Of primary
importance is the BOX under the
“Advance slide” heading in front
of the “On mouse click” option.
If that box is checked, a mouse
click anywhere on this slide will
advance the program to the next
slide. If it is NOT checked, this
will not occur, and only the
buttons will be interactive. If we
click the cursor in this box, it will
toggle the option on or off..
•If we want this condition to be the same for all our slides in the
program, we can click the “Apply to All Slides” option below.
(Don’t forget to save whatever changes we make!!!)
•Less critical but still interesting is the mode of slide transition.
Up to now a new slide just appeared when we clicked the arrow.
But there are other options as you will see when you click on the
red arrow below
•
•
•
•
At the top of this menu is a
Transition Pull Down Menu. This
determines how the program
moves from slide to slide. There
is a long list of options under this
heading some of which are
shown to the right. But being a
person who can’t make a
decision, I chose the “Random
Transition” option.
Hence, if you toggle back and
forth between this and previous
slide you should see some
variation in the mode of
transition.
Of course, you can also set the
speed and even add sound
under the “Modify transition”
heading.
But be careful. If you then click
on the “Apply to All Slides”
button, the effects will generalize
to all the slides in your lesson.
Be sure that’s what you want
•
SOUNDS—can add a lot of life and sparkle to a lesson. You may have
noticed that in the Action Buttons and Texts as well as the Slide
Transitions we have looked at, there were options to interject sounds into
the action. Power Point has a small library of sounds, but you may have
access to others which you would like to use. On the next slide are some
sounds taken from a scene entitled …
• If we have found a sound file some place else that is compatible with Power
Point (many of them are), we can Insert the file into our lesson slide by using
the “Insert” pull down menu, the “Movies and Sounds” option and then the
“Sound from File” option. The procedure for locating and opening
(inserting) the sound file is the same as that used in all programs to find and
open any file.
• I have also had success in copying and pasting sound files directly into my
lesson slides. Here is one I copied from another program. If you click on it,
you may recognize the voice of our Department Chairperson…
•
If we are in the PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT mode of Power Point (as opposed to
the SHOW or PRESENTATION mode) we can click once on the picture of the
“speaker” to copy it. It should get some small circles around it..
Then, while the circles are there we can copy (Ctrl & C) and paste (CTRL &
V) to capture it and put it into a different lesson slide…in this case we will
paste it into the Negative Reinforcement slide of our three slide lesson
Project. If you wish, you can try copying the Speaker Icon on the previous
slide right into your own program.
• Once the sound icon is on the proper slide, there are some decisions and
adjustments that need to be made. They include:
– 1. Do we want to the icon to be visible when we present the lesson.
– 2. How do we want to start the sound file to play.
– 3. When do we want the sound file to play.
When these decisions are made, the adjustments can be accomplished by
opening the “Slide Show” pull down menu and scrolling down to the
“Custom Animation” option. (Remember, the speaker icon still has the
circles around it to indicate that we are modifying it.)
• When we click on the “Custom
Animation” option, a “Custom
Animation” Control Menu appears
on the right side of the screen. This
will be used to modify our sound file,
as well as to add effects to other
objects, like a text box. Please
notice that the sound icon still has
the small circles around it. That
means it is represented in the
Custom Animation Control Menu by
the highlighted box which, in this
case, is labeled “media 1
QuickTime™ and a
decompressor
are needed to see this picture.
• If we click the cursor on the
Start Pull Down Menu, we get
three choices relative to how
we will start the sound file.
• If we choose the first, “Start
on Click,”the sound will not
begin until the viewer clicks
on the sound icon.
• If we chose the second,
“Start with Previous,” it will
begin automatically when the
slide opens. This is the one
we will choose for now
• And, if we chose the third,
“Start after Previous,” it will
begin automatically after any
other special effect on the
card is executed. More
choices are available in the
Effect Options link.
•
In the Effect Options, there are two choices. One is Effect and the other
is Timing. We will discuss Timing on the next Slide. In the Effect Option
the choice is given to have the animated object make a sound during the
animation. For example, when an arrow comes in on this page, not only
can we control how it comes in (e.g., straight, circular, twirling etc.) but we
can designate the sound it will make (in this case a “whooshing” sound.)
This is done in the Sound Pull Down Menu.
• In the Effect Options Menu,
we can see that the Object
movement was set to “Ease
In.” The question
addressed in this menu is
“When” the action should
begin. Under the “Start”
Pull Down Menu there are
several choices. These
include, “With Previous;
After Previous; and On
Click.” Beyond that we can
set a Delay in seconds, and
the Speed with which the
Animation is executed. The
last option sets the number
of repetitions the movement
should have.
• Lets see how these few
features look when they
have been added to our
Three Slide Lesson.
Categorizing Lesson: Question
#1
Which picture does not belong?
Sorry, wrong picture!
Please try again.
Please
Click here to return
YES, YES, YOU ARE A ROARING SUCCESS,
YOU TAKE THE CAKE!
That was CORRECT.
OUT OF MEMORY
PLEASE DEPOSIT
$500 FOR 3 MINUTES
•
We have only two more things to discuss before I leave you with a very profound
philosophical concept by one of the greats of antiquity to guide your therapy
development! This should take no more than THREE MINUTES to process!
•
The first relates to toggling between the Programming (Presentation) mode and the
Showing mode; and the second pertains to saving the presentation in either mode.
•
When we are DEVELOPING a program in Power Point, the computer monitor shows
things like the list of our slides in a column to the left, a Central work area ( the slide
we are working on), and maybe some menu, like Action Settings, to the right. These
are the tools by which we build and modify the program. Whenever Power Point is in
this Development mode, we can make changes. But if we want to see how the
program will look when we present it, we must switch to the SHOW mode.
• To switch from the Development mode to the Show mode we must
click on a particular icon that looks like this…
• It is located in the left bottom corner (indicated by the arrow). It is
always visible. Once we are in the Presentation (show) mode, we can
get back to the Development mode simply by hitting the escape
(ESC) key.
Now that we have our program developed, we need to Save it.
Actually we should have been saving it frequently all the way along.
This is easily and quickly acomplished by holding down the “Apple
(Command)” key while we hit the “S” key every time we added
something we wouldn’t want to lose.
But the first time we save our Program we should always use the
“Save As” option under the “File” menu.
•
•
•
First we must decide where to save it. In this case, in a new folder called
“Working MAC Tutorial” (located on the desktop).
Then we must give it a name, like “Presentation2.ppt.”
And then we must save it in some Format, in this case, the Presentation mode
if we wish to keep working on the program.
•
•
When a file, saved as a Presentation, is opened it is displayed in the
Development Mode, which means that all of the tools for modifying the
program are accessible and/or visible on the screen.
But if we wish to have the Program open in a “play only” mode, we will need
to save the program (file) as a “Power Point Show.”
•
•
•
When a file, saved as a show, is opened by clicking on the file icon itself, ,
the program opens and runs as a full screen interactive lesson. No
developmental tools are visible or available. However, if the file is opened
through the Power Point Program first, then it opens in the Developmental
Mode, and modifications can be made.
Which leaves us with just one more topic of discussion. One of your
Herculean tasks for CD 485 was to make a Three Card Therapy Program.
After you have done that, the next Herculean task is to use the skills you
learned in the first Task, to develop a Three (or more but not necessary)
Card Speech Generating Device (SGD) program. The only new skill,
perhaps, you would need to learn is how to record your (or some one else’s)
voice. I will explain how to do that now.
If you have an audio recording program, you could use that to record your
voice and then insert that wave file into your program. But it is easier I think
to use the recording option of Power Point.
• First you use the “Insert Menu” and scroll down to “Sound &
Music” and then to the right to “Record Sound.”
•
The recording controls that appear are intuitive. Press the RED to Record and the
Square to Stop. Use the play arrow to hear what you recorded. Be sure to save the
wav file UNDER THE NAME YOU WANT (i.e., change the default name from
“Recorded Sound”) and then later use the Insert menu again to bring the sound file
from where you saved it into your Power Point Program.
•
•
•
The following is an example of what I mean by a SGD Program. This one
has four cards rather than the required three. Sorry about that. It is easy to
get carried away. On your first card you need a minimum of 6 squares (3 x
3). You can have more if you wish. The second and third pages can be 3 x
3 squares portraying categories of something like people or food. The
pictures you can get almost anywhere by copying and pasting them into
your program directly or on to your desktop and then by inserting them into
your program.
Please notice, that I have put in the periphery of my example, buttons which
have familial phrases, like “hello,” Good bye,” and “I need help!” etc. If you
wish to step outside the proverbial box and try a different arrangement, that
is a courageous thing to do and I say go for it.
One of the issues you will have to decide is what vocabulary to put into your
device. And this, of course, will depend upon the age of the intended client
and the use to which it will be put. It could be, for example, for an adult
patient in intensive care who has recently had a tracheotomy and can not
speak. Or it could be for kids In a kindergarten class; or a young adult who
delivers Pizza, etc. The choice is yours to decide what kind of a client your
device is designed for.
HELLO
FOOD
GOODBY
ACTION
Shut
Down
PLEASE
HELP
ME
THANK
YOU
PEOPLE
HELLO
GOODBY
AND
RETURN
THANK
YOU
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
THANK
YOU
RETURN
AND
PLEASE
HELP
ME
HELLO
GOODBY
RETURN
PLEASE
HELP
ME
MY
YOUR
AND
•
This ends our lesson on how to develop a Power Point Therapy Lesson,
and a Speech Generating Device (SGD). I will now share with you with a
profound philosophical concept, which may help to guide your future
therapy planning. For this we reach far back in time to the words of one of
the World’s greatest Philosophers…
Who said…
…it is just amazing how a FEW INJECTIONS of some SPECIAL EFFECTS
can turn a somewhat DRAB visualization into a DAZZLING PRESENTATION.
…GOING TO USE COMPUTER PROGRAMS LIKE POWER POINT TO DEVELOP
THERAPY LESSONS THAT WILL BE EFFECTIVE AND FUN.
•
To escape from this program, please use the Escape (Esc) Key.